Home

Dodge 2009 Automobile User Manual

1. 34 Using The Panic Alarm 24 MiTrunk Safety Warning 4 35 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Trunk Emergency Release 36 Transmitter Battery Service 25 Occupant Restraints 22222izas e Rey 36 General Information 26 Lap Shoulder Belts eee 37 H Remote Starting System 6 ees 26 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 42 How To Use Remote Start 26 Seat Belt Pretensioners 42 la Door Locks a4 os cea Rr RR REIR 28 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ee es re 28 BeltAlert9 22 202 e0date eis boide dias 43 Power Door Locks 29 Anomalie Lodang Mode N EMIS acus M Windows ercran edhe ds 34 pRRRY eae 32 Sree BIE a Women eaete ties a a 32 Seat Belt Extender 6 eee 45 Wind Buffeting assequi eter see kai 34 Devel one Pront Ta encer Seppe Restraint System SRS Airbag 46 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Event Data Recorder EDR 56 Exhaust Gas sae cae eee D RR EE E 68 Child Restraint pace eas Be aed ERES 58 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 67 MR ELE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OS pS wieuicepunbdutun ipsa Eaa li Outside The Vehicle Lus 70 Transporting Passengers 05 68 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
2. sess 123 On With Wipers 00000004 121 128 PASSING one des dne d Perd Ue Re 124 SWICB usce deer tere up e dene 120 Time Delay 22 cee e RR RR RR RES 122 Heated Mirrors eer eee e yer 77 Heated Seats 446 INDEX a Heater cc cae ae EX DIRE OPER E 230 Heater Engine Block 000 251 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 124 Hill Start Assist llle eee 283 Hitches Trailer TOWING inesse ey ree doen ege s 328 Holder Cup exa ee rum deer hp BAe Res 146 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 134 Hood Releases acs 3 kl eh ee RR Rep RR 119 TONIHON i 4 Paras dere eraot dene ROSA ee c 13 Key i Ateen en e ee PES RI S A Is 12 13 Ignition Key Removal lesse 13 Illuminated Entry 0 0 00 200 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 00 0 15 Infant Restraint leen 58 59 Information Center Vehicle 169 Instrument Cluster 0 0 00 0005 156 158 Instrument Panel and Controls 155 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 393 Integrated Power Module Fuses 394 Interior Appearance Care 0005 392 Interior Lights socors te beber e go 125 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 127 Introduction 4 cyst tanes a Eee RE ens 4 Jack Location s aset resed pam trasda aiaia 345 Jack Operation i 5 scere ce en ears RR s 348 Jacking Instruchons ia sess yere nee 348 Jump starting
3. 159 Engine Temperature Warning 161 EXterIOE iuis canes e anre a Re Rcs 70 FOE eme 34 Rechve RES AA siss 123 162 Hazard Warning Flasher 338 Headlight Switch ees 120 Headlights satip xem 120 403 Headlights On Reminder 123 Headlights On With Wipers 121 128 HighBeam rige taiant aoe e uad 124 162 High Beam Indicator oono aoaaa 162 10 448 INDEX ae High Beam Low Beam Select 124 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 2c 19 Instrument Cluster 0005 120 158 Intensity Control qos 2204 56 penne re 125 Intent sered eka dos e sux aoe Rae 125 133 License 2g v eR RE eee Se SS BR es 407 Lights On Reminder 005 123 EOW Fuel 2 313 ce eae ha ae ead oo 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 168 Map Reading 5 eme 124 133 Oil Pressure cele 162 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 126 PASSING 2254399 999 sneha ede Rua 124 Reading sem rs RE s 124 133 Seat Belt Reminder lesen 162 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 166 Service idco sa bea sacr ab ed ERs 402 403 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 168 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 166 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 166 307 Traction Control 0 0 00 288 Turm Signal i c sene 70 123 124 160 Vanity MirrOr i4 9423 9er ceo RR P es 77 inlcr cd 158 Warning Instrument Clus
4. 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode WEL CD PERVER MPS AU AMACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the me J come mere Powe Pome ome Qn radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second mm time to turn off the radio GI Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be 042305232 set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure
5. ESP BAS 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 15 High Beam Indicator E This indicator will turn on when the high beam 777 headlights are on Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving 17 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light will turn on when the front fog lights are on ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 19 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The odometer shows the total
6. General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pr
7. Power Seatback Control 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Manual Front Seatback Recline To recline 1 Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Recline Lever 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Lumbar Support Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To lower it press the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint 81e9897e Adjustable Head Restraint 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated The heaters
8. Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your veh
9. under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt electrical outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is ON This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit NOTE If desired the front power outlet can be con verted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Front Power Outlet The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the p
10. e A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without us
11. es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will CUR sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos sible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP If this indicator light flashes during accelera e little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
12. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION i 6 o6 nim 9g noe uim iis Ro cR Use 9 8 9 SUP
13. WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so en STARTING AND OPERATING 273 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fl
14. plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle
15. 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the
16. 2ce m mace aka aso 355 Key Programming lees 16 Key Replacement 0 0 00 cee eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 0 15 Key In Reminder 0 0 0 000s eee ee 14 Keyless Entry System llle 20 Keyless Go ser RR eg ee mes 12 175 246 Keys ases ad a Hos oa aula ne dae on tia dos 12 en INDEX 447 Kicker Sound System cso neeaaea a n 227 Knee Bolster 0 000 cee eee eee 46 Lane Change and Turn Signals 124 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 37 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CEDldr n se eg ik SB ah Begs eR renew ti ds 61 63 Latches sectas sat REA ec UR UR Ra E nes 70 HOO 4 eds Sete te ae SSL RU eue dE SS 119 Lead Free Gasoline llis 316 Leaks Fluid peg eraan eara RR a 70 Life of Tiesos i 04s bi 4444004490444 05 303 Light Bulbs scrise 0 5ni 04 624 eu804 70 402 Lights ee ae a Wit eee tie eee ee 70 120 ADAE i cose BS ERE qeu 52 55 69 160 Alarm uude 5 44 Se ea REG REOR y Ges 166 AnttLook E e RE y E e 168 280 Automatic Headlights liess 121 Brake Assist Warning 06 288 Brake Warning soodsat merga aua a 164 278 Bulb Replacement 402 403 Center Mounted Stop 4 407 Courtesy Reading 4 124 133 Cruise EET 158 Daytime Running 546 a yn 122 Dimmer Switch Headlight 123 124 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 288 Electronic Throttle Control Warning
17. Air Cleaner 2c RR ee nes 372 en INDEX 443 Block Heater 0 0 0c ewes 251 Break In Recommendations 67 Checking Oil Level 000 368 369 Compartment 14 444 2d diego d e es 363 364 Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 379 409 COOLING x soe e de c eee afit aatis 379 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 68 320 Fails to Start 5 522 43 T Ero Re EORR Pe E us 249 Flooded Starting 0005 249 Fuel Requirements 0005 316 J mp Starting sss anre vere dr uer dk as 355 Olla o ed ei ee BO ee 368 408 409 Oil Change Interval 00 163 369 Oil FilleCap sesir sete ae C em ee aie 370 Oil Filter 1a uou a3 e ar eres 371 Oil Filter Disposal esses 371 Oil Selecto 22s ka RE Rr S 370 408 Oil Syntheti soser he cee e RR 371 Overheating 1s ey aug eg aea Bees 338 SIAFUng on creep ede hob pr UR ORAE A en 243 Temperature Gauge 200000 159 Engine Oil Viscosity eee 370 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 54 Entry System Illuminated 19 Ethanol 44e vo RSA Dae Seed 317 Event Data Recorder llle 56 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 68 320 377 Exhaust System 0 0 eee eee 68 377 Exterior Folding Mirrors 76 Exterior Lighting casas is ae e RARE 120 Exterior Lights i424 p eb n RR RES 70 Filler Location Fuel llle 320 Filters Air Cleaner s arratse
18. GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR es STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing th
19. NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights will flash the park lights will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The
20. Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to aconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconn
21. Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa 81f05e05 Sau qe qu RUM Oe niue tion Example T145 80D18 103M 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels as this can result in rear axle damage Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 TIRE SIZING TERMS R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be
22. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 fil
23. a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the ignition switch After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
24. battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Continued flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points
25. because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties b
26. clean it with rubbing alcohol 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
27. es STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Keyless Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a butto
28. especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Trans mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition t
29. increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a biton the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the r
30. or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stoppe
31. ovis ees C Re manede de 345 348 Compact Spates Sacrae d ea dup ae ded a 300 Flat Changing 522m ERE ER aos 345 General Information llle 296 High Speed ice rm S25 beet REPRE 300 Inflation Pressures 2 0 0 0 eee eee 298 Jacking s ecse rm ende ristis 347 348 Lite of Tires 3 aa Gs cea ead onsec xS ns 303 Load Capacity suede cese ERR REESE 294 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 307 Pressure Warning Light 166 Quality Grading ille 434 Radial sas eaea E ica ae aw GO eee ee 300 Replacement i2 eye eo ba Benes ds 303 en INDEX 455 Rotation enean E MUR E E e As 306 Safety goed ae eee a a Rar praed 289 296 SIZES a uehgo qe eA R3 G pu bale d Pare he EY 290 Snow lites 23 2320 04s 2 ede bee ek PE nS 306 Spare D 2asdegoeseueunabE REOR SOR RU ae RUE d 345 SPINNING cite aa aoe dae Aes eon eed a h ede 301 Trailer TOWINS acids dora Roxas debe f ami 332 Tread Wear Indicators 00005 302 lo Open Hood sie su seg A eee TR ea 119 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 329 Torque Converter Clutch 0 263 TOWING PETIT 325 24 Hour Towing Assistance 5 93 Behind a Motor Home 336 Disabled Vehicle llle 359 Guid jussa Bianco eed boned ba Ge ee eed 328 Recreational llle 336 Weight ense em eX EE PEE ES 328 Towing ASSISTANCE csiga va ccr dit oa e aes eed 93 10 456 INDEX MM Towing Vehicle Behind
32. remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type mH function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a
33. vx 3er E eS ed a Eke ees 218 Play Mode 1 ee eee 219 List Or Browse Mode 220 Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios c AMEN MUN System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Modes ee 6 vein aceon ce a eer Sues Satellite Antenna Reception Quality Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se H Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS H Bquipped iiec eR ers 227 ll Remote Sound System Controls 228 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 229 lil Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 230 Mi Climate Controls eese 230 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating SySLeT cute d qu sdb qr v a Ode VE Y dS ead 230 Operating Tips xx eI Rees 235 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040105703 1 Air Outlets 5 Heated Seat Switch 9 Ignition Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 6 ESP OFF Switch 10 Trunk Release Switch 3 Glove Compartment 7 Hazard Warning Switch 11 Headlight Switch 4 Radio 8 Climate Control 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
34. warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle ace ees Ghee ae RE 429 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 431 Prepare For The Appointment 429 Service Contract 431 Prepare A Dist ssh dee eae CR es 429 i Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 432 Be Reasonable With Requests 429 MEMOPAR Parts 000000000 432 H if You Need Assistance 04 4 429 Wi Reporting Safety Defects 432 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 430 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 430 Du trae fg dte he eas pU 432 iQ In Mexico Contact 0 0 00 ee 430 Canes og irespebrtirvue bey sh 459 428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M E Publication Order Forms 433 Traction Grades www sess 435 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades ee 435 Quality Grades ssec t na 434
35. 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes System Warnings Customer Information Features Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guag
36. ACTIVATE UPPER ANDLOWPR HEATED SEAT PORK QUIE AIR OUTLET HGH C LIFTGATE RELEASE ANDUFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK OPEN 1 OWFR AR UTI FT a E ID e voce suosmcooon TRUNK OCCK ARCONDTENMO CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION ANCHOR BUTTON je LOWER ANCHORS SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY amp oe FOR UCONNECI T RELEASE HANDLE HAL DREN LATCH BUTTON DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTELE SEE OWNERS TOP DOWN Tor ur MANUAL ISO INTRODUCTION 5 ESP BAS FL ECIRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC BRAKE D SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 2 rane wee ial CONTRO AWD O ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORE RRAKF TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 010505550 6 INTRODUCTION ME WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN Location Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your v
37. Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine ZFRBLP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm LZFRSC 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Oil Filter 3 5L and 5 7L Engines MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Fuel Selection 3 5L and 5 7L Engine Automatic Transmission 87 to 89 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine Manual Transmission 91 Octane Preferred 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Pa
38. OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 CONSOLE FEATURES Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort cupholder use and shifting ease Rear Cupholders Sliding Console Armrest 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Console Storage The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest and also contains a 12 Volt power outlet a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface UCI UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Refer to Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped in Section 4 for further informa tion Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton for the rear window defroster is Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth located on the mode knob of the climate control switch bank Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors if equipped An amber light shows that the defroster is n and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labe
39. Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port located in the center console e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port located on the center console Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the
40. System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if both doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your veh
41. TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IV The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Low Tire PS sc p at a Em od Sane Seen O71 iw d sinau et 11 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with low pressure including those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will STARTING AND OPERATING 313 turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
42. TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will disp
43. Transmitter 00 134 en INDEX 457 Unleaded Gasoline llli 316 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 42 Vanity MITOS s cu ehe eee ha EUR kami 77 Variance Compass iE gd EORR S dee 177 Vehicle Certification Label 323 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 040 294 323 325 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage se chads aad on eee nee s 235 401 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Qila sss sasa eadi eee 370 Voice Recognition System VR 107 Warning Flasher Hazard 338 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 25440 2464 e440 ee bate al 158 Warnings and Cautions 04 6 Warranty Information 6 432 Washer Adding Fluid secs sence aaa ehoas aasa 376 Washers Windshield 126 127 376 Washing Vehicle llle 390 Water Driving Through 0 000000 000 272 Wheel and Wheel Trim lessen 391 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 391 Wind Buffeting ss coegi 34 143 Window Airbag Side Curtain 47 52 Window Fogging 6 6 6 6 236 WINGOWS adis Ue Ea Gee ES ea de 32 POWER anges kk Range EE dere CRUS uade 32 Windshield Defroster sess 70 233 Windshield Washers ss 126 127 Fluid 456 rer eoru dcin ia Bien Es 376 Windshi
44. a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tion Remove and store the extender when not needed 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver side front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger side front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are em bossed on the airbag covers 81e8d12e 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This This vehicle is also equipped with supplemental side allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that curtain airbags located above the side windows to are based on collision severity protect the driver and passenger sitting next to a window Their covers are also
45. achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE SIZING TERMS Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use en STARTING AND OPERA
46. after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate
47. and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc
48. as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu
49. be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light S This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning
50. bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail light assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner it Close the trunk 13 Reinstall tail light retainer Center Tail Backup Light See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer License Light 1 Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 818db273 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the light to the rear fascia and then install the Screws 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 5 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 6 0 Quarts 5 7 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 0 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 5
51. cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a
52. e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Depress the brake pedal press the clutch pedal to the floor manual transmission or e Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL When the lever is released a new set speed will be established 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is
53. e Shift into DRIVE and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diag nostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis si
54. engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be ad
55. erite ecc mis aiis 70 402 Calibration Compass 00000000 ee 176 Capacities Fluid sas eek aces ER eda 408 Caps Filler Fuel ozcsieweera ezxcueexeee i p eed os 320 Oil Engine users cci e Re teen a UR 370 Power Steering i2 ivweo e whe Pa e ERE 275 Radiator Coolant Pressure 382 Car Washes leeren 390 Carbon Monoxide Warning 68 320 Cargo Vehicle Loading 06 323 Cellular Phone were REESE 79 Center High Mounted Stop Light 407 Certification kabel soises asem br RR RR 323 Chaitis Tire set areren pace eR PDT 304 Changing A Flat Tire serasa artie tenie ga RERS 345 Chart Tire Sizing is des eee Ch eee ae ek 290 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 366 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 68 Checks Safety utes ee xs 68 Child Restraint 00 58 59 60 63 64 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 61 63 Clean Air Gasoline 00 00000000 317 Cleaning Wheels ues ee ER Cr Re Rus e SH Ae 391 Windshield Wiper Blades 376 Climate Control i Lieu etx RR RES 230 Clock sue cm RR 183 194 198 207 Cold Weather Operation 0040 249 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 229 en INDEX 441 Compact Spare Tire sees ees de cee eee eae 300 Compass os s fedes Rea RR ERR reg he 176 Compass Calibration 00000 176 Compass Variance iid sei cac ee abe ea des 177 Comput
56. for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 or under Odometer Trip Odom eter under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Sec tion 4 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe CAUTION Failure to perform the required ma
57. for assistance 19 With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi 1 8 bar press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF and turn off the engine Then disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle 20 Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribu tion of the tire sealant within the tire 21 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 22 Move the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or in gear manual transmission turn OFF the engine and set the parking brake 23 Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 24 Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed 25 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure gauge 4 If the pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or greater proceed to the following step NOTE If the pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance 26 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or gear manual trans mission and start the engine 27 Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar by pressing the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON and watching the pressure gauge When the tire pressure is set to the
58. head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlight Switch Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights Only for parking light and instrument panel light operation When this feature is active the headlights will turn on Turn it to the second detent for headlight parking light approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on and instrument panel light operation if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO A 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they
59. into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning
60. key in Manual Transmission the ignition A child could operate power win Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU dows other controls or move the vehicle TRAL and depress the clutch pedal before starting ve Do not leave animals or children inside parked hicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is cause serious injury or death pressed to the floor Continued 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Normal Starting with Integrated Key Manual WARNING Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor and turn the verter and once the engine has started ignite and ignition switch to the START position and release when damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has the engine starts If the engine fails to start within a discharged battery booster cables may be used to 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure procedure carefully See Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions
61. labeled SRS AIRBAG e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc Side Window Airbag NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING e Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front
62. left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Pos Dis No program type or un POP istnd Wiri Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personal
63. light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of i an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 26 Door Ajar Indicator This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar 27 Decklid Ajar Indicator T
64. limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nmm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks t
65. lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 7 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa tion in place of the remaining steps in this procedure 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spa
66. of the following occurs have wiring including adding any kind of badges or an authorized dealer service the system promptly stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame You need proper knee impact protection in a e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket second interval equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the driving airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceler
67. oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the rear axle fluid 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a LLUDCDODOLD Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes O O O O 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or Odometer Reading Date
68. or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS a Mirrors oko Rem nem Rm ee 75 Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Automa
69. or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file
70. phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone
71. phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or
72. preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pus
73. pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 e Recirculation Control Use this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passenger compartment A light will illuminate when the system is in recirculation mode Use the recirculation mode to provide maximum A C performance in hot ambient conditions or to block outside odors dust etc NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather may cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Air Conditioning Control Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for a few seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time and set the temperature control to full cool by r
74. pressure indicated on the tire pressure label press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF and turn off the engine 28 Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and reinstall the valve cap 29 Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorized MOPARS parts dealership 30 Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center NOTE e If a pressure of at least 19 psi 1 3 bar cannot be maintained in the tire the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance e Do not operate the electric air pump for more than eight minutes to avoid overheating The air pump may be used again once it has cooled down e Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every four years to assure optimum operation of the system ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 If TIREFIT is liquid clean water and a damp cloth will WARNING Continued remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous components Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire has body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start been inspected or run the engine while the vehicle is
75. radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will mn jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use
76. reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram ER 7e EE 81f0565d Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended tire rotation frequency Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 307 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires
77. reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls
78. rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se most direct path between the anchor and the child the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an child restraint rearward and downward into the seat inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle removing slack in the straps according to the child that the seat belts are not toys and should not be restraint manufacturer s instructions played with and never leave your child unattended in NOTE the vehicle e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the WARNING opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Improper installation of a child restraint to the e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat be
79. s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Oil Change Required Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel Transmit Channel Training 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Channel t Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Check TPM System with a single chime ESP Off Electronic Stability Program is deactivated Check Gascap Key FOB Battery Low Service Keyless System Wrong Key Push Button or Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Section 2 1 4 SKIPSHIFT Stereo If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Audio Surround If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message
80. s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition Syst
81. s reg are RE e ER Troubleshooting Tips General Information 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME H Power Sunroof If Equipped 140 Ignition Off Operation 143 Opening Sunroof Partially 141 Sunroof Fully Closed 143 Opening Sunroof Express 141 W Electrical Power Outlets 0 143 Closing Sunroof Partially 141 agCuplioldetS 2 vussceye vue teehee Enn 146 Closing Sunroof Express 142 Front Cupholders sess 146 Pinch Protect Feature 6 142 Rear Cupholders sess 146 Finch Protect Ovettide 4 42404 255444 142 W Console Features serus e 147 Venting Sunroof Express 142 Sliding Center Console Armrest 147 Sunshade Operation 142 ConsoleStoragge lessen 148 Wind Buffeting aua rex ees cy eo 143 W Rear Window Features 149 Sunroof Maintenance 143 Rear Window Defroster 149 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the
82. service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlights when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Front Rear Side Marker Light 1 Remove the front rear side marker Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the clip 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Tail Turn Stop Light e f a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint 2 Using a screwdriver remove the tail light retainer 1 Open the trunk 2 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the front rear side marker ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 3 Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail light 5 Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the assembly tail light assembly 6 Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs 812c4b54 4 Pull back the trunk liner 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 8 Disconnect the electrical connector 9 Turn the appropriate
83. soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Six Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION e Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch ped
84. sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle FUNCTION SELECT Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp b Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio media and Universal Customer Interface UCI functions i e advance presets select next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek v up and down radio stations tracks chapters files
85. than approximately 0 16 in 4 mm tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving TIREFIT should not be used in such circum stances Do not drive the vehicle under such cir cumstances Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance Continued ately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physi cian immediately e Keep away from open flame or heat source 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Sealing Tire with TIREFIT 1 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers 2 Move the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or in gear manual transmission turn OFF the engine and set the parking brake 3 Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk 4 Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 out from the TIREFIT kit 5 Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated tire 6 Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6 coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve 7 Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on the instrument panel 8 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or gear manual trans mission and start the engine 9 Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON The air pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant white fluid will flow from the sealant bottle 5 through the TIR
86. the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata Artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle m
87. the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To re
88. to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
89. vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col lision Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Maintaining Your Airbag System NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate MARANG Airbag Warning Light e Modifications to any part of the airbag system You will want to have the airbags ready to could cause it to fail when you need it You could 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While be injured because the airbags are not there to the airbag system is designed to be mainte protect you Do not modify the components or nance free if any
90. with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Turn ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features un der Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock both doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK butto
91. you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation an
92. 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressin
93. 191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training e Your motor
94. 334 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground o Q q 9 057003766 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn Se G 9 LA 9 057003765 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater tha
95. 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary L Lc O C C L 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires M Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints 4 Replace the spark plugs 3 5L Engine Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect exhaust system 4 Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Inspect the manual transmission fluid if Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends Flush and replace the engine coolant if equipped add as necessary and boot seals replace if necessary not done at 60 months Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code R
96. A Functions Performance Pages uconnect gps If Equipped System Status Messages and mode displayed will change between Trip tus Personal Settings and Surround Sound If Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Personal Settings Customer Programmable es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Left Right Door Ajar Door
97. ARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure WARNING that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near SEES the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank filled tank is full Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will displa
98. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com
99. CR CR UR ELAD e 6 8 C8 S own 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ccc cceccccccccccccccccs 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece tnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece ccc ecc hh n nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc cc cece cece were were hh t hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cece cree cre cee hh hh hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 44359945999 959949 v 9e vy OTE CHET OTE OS 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cece ccc recs rccc he nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece cece cere cece cee hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 huma HER EO RE RES RR QU E Gnd E Q4 8 01 BNE ACA AUR RU P o d Roe ius teas INTRODUCTION CONTENTS H Introduction eene 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 E How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE Afte
100. Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the
101. EFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire 10 Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then read the pressure gauge 4 If the tire inflates to 26 psi 1 8 bar or greater proceed to Step 19 of this procedure If not proceed to the following step 11 Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 OFF Then disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle 12 Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back and forth approximately 30 ft 9 1 m to distribute the sealant more evenly within the tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 13 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers 14 Move the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or in gear manual transmission turn OFF the engine and set the parking brake 15 Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open 16 Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed 17 Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or gear manual trans mission and start the engine 18 Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I ON The air pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi 1 8 bar within five minutes If the tire inflates to this level proceed to the following step NOTE If a tire pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar is not obtained within five minutes the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call
102. EM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the 366 MAINTAINING YOUR
103. Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following limitations With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles 48 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmis sion failure 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc be towed more than 30 miles 48 km the vehicle must be while being towed the key must be in the ON position transported using a flatbed truck not the ACC position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL CAUTION Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front A Tow Dolly with sling type towing equipment Damage to the The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this front fascia will result vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles 48 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another ve
104. Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 419 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME TTS eee YE 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service i 66 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil A Rotate tires E mM N filter J Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped ir 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary ME Rotate tires e I If using your vehicle for any of the Q Inspect the CV joints following Dusty or off road conditions J Inspect exhaust system S Inspect the engine air cleaner filter J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary C replace if necessary J Inspect the rear axle fluid H 1 Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the E D following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F U 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Author
105. Modifications Alterations Vehicle Monitor Tire Pressure System Mopar Parts MIBE ETBE 5354s BW Ee be CERRO Rd Multi Function Control Lever New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints cs as at anata aaia eee Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer Trip Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Indicator Reset Oil Engine Capacity Change Interval 450 INDEX ae Checking esu tay a paige ae aisles gates 368 369 Dips ck iss d054 9 5G ee epee de ead 368 369 Disposal eme oasis TES NRTAST TRES 371 Filter ce coh Gtr RD cate oe Bee ee ea ane ees 371 409 Filter Disposal dmi x DR Rcs m s 371 Identification Logo llle 370 Materials Added to 2 2 0 00 00 eee 371 Recommendation 370 408 OyDtlieUC suk ads does ae a iae sE Rak goes 371 VISCOSITY iiu vastes dah ate defen aes 370 408 Oil Filter Change gai raain dipa batho ne dla 371 Oil Filter Selection 0 0 0 0 00 0 cee 371 Onboard Diagnostic System 365 366 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 134 Operating Precautions 005 365 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0005 76 Overdrive s 2445 264 dc 3404 008 be V bTEGS 262 Overhead Console 0 0 0 0 eee eee 133 Overheating Engine 000 160 338 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 433 Paint Care 22a a eo ahs sons Sad 4S Gas os 389 Panic Alarm 22 a udo 2 604 044 2 9 Psa deat 24 Parking Brake 22 sese D an
106. NG AND OPERATING ME AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING CAUTION Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine firmly on the brake pedal is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL General Information into any forward gear when the engine is above The automatic transmission selects individual gears au idle speed tomatically dependent upon Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating
107. NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Cooling System e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle automatic transmission only Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires ignition switch is in the ON position disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic You or others can be badly burned by hot coo
108. NSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 040305734 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM m _ _ 35 i ms wre gis The AS 4 d 040305874 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is on 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 6 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle I
109. Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA 042005200 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to s
110. OP Button Manual Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START STOP button Release the button when the engine starts If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds release the button wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting release the button To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shifter lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park mes sage and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the system will automatically time out after 60 minute
111. OUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS o Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with an integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go feature for more information refer to Keyless Go If Equipped under Starting Procedure in Section 5 of this manual Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an 2 ACCESSORY gs nt 3 ON ignition switch It has four operating positions three with eo m detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Fob With Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide th
112. On Reminder 123 Lumbar Support less 115 Fog Lights If Equipped 123 Head Restraints 00 0000 115 Multifunction Lever 6 ee ee 123 Heated Seats saec ehe cag ees 116 Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 124 Folding Rear Seat 2m Rn 117 Interior Lights ce isea 24 125 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 126 Intermittent Wiper System 127 Mist Feature i222 es 127 Windshield Washers 4 127 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 128 H Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 128 li Electronic Speed Control 129 To Activate cesa xm RR Y eds 130 To Set At A Desired Speed 131 To Deactivate satge Mn bla aes dee 131 To Resume Speed sss 131 To Vary The Speed Setting 131 To Accelerate For Passing WM Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglasses Storage sess ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming Homelink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using Homelink s Reprogramming A Single HomeLink BUTON ccu sme Soke xe eae Tad DeCULIy atarra Ex
113. PAIR IF EQUIPPED Im 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the Small punctures particularly those in the tread can be engine off immediately and call for service sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in 3 4 5 the trunk 6 81596a6e TIREFIT Kit 1 Air pump hose TIREFIT Location 2 Power plug and cable 3 AIR PUMP switch 4 Pressure gauge ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 WARNING Continued e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT change clothing as soon as possible In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immedi 5 TIREFIT sealant bottle 6 TIREFIT sealant hose WARNING e Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or repairing a tire Cuts or punctures larger
114. Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number
115. R parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 5L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintaine
116. Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a LOOCLUD Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 417 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a LLULCDODOLD Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Ins
117. Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Tp40 Tp4 News News Weather Weather Nostalgi Nostaig By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty Public Public 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after
118. TING 263 3 Third This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmis sion will operate normally in 1st 2nd and 3rd while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis tress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than in other gear range selections CAUTION Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmis sion Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine c
119. TING 293 TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard Va SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OC NEVER EXCEED XXX P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI INFLATION PRESSURE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire infla
120. Tle GOTT n sad deta tu hea ten Maa Ward a os 128 Wheel Tt 21222232223 Rer 459 128 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 522 pA aee Xa E A ewes 228 DIOFaBE saw pats cea iden nds danda is axes 401 Storage Vehicl amp 04 es tete 235 401 Storing Your Vehicle 0 000000 401 St ck Freeing ee vie ca eee eo RR 358 oun ROOF egie ura ead daw Hh a Ee bee S 140 Sunglasses Storage ores e nE a ane a EEE E 134 Sunroof Maintenance 004 143 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 46 Sway Control Trailer 0 0040 327 synthetic Engine Oil ce tetan dE Raed 371 System Remote Starting 000 26 Tachometer 22cm em er es 158 Telescoping Steering Column 128 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 159 339 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 61 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tilt Steering Column oe secie dana K E 128 Time Delay Headlight 04 122 Tire and Loading Information Placard 294 Tire Identification Number TIN 292 Tire Markings i29 9 Y RR e RR 289 Tire Safety Information 04 289 TIREFIT pua koreae gente date 2 C REN EN 339 WS i234 e RE RE ea ae Reed ea ae 70 296 434 Aging Life of Tires 00 303 Air Pressure 42 ge en hp PS ae LER SP 296 CHAINS nesa retas aeddes aena seth EEE a 304 Changing
121. Treadwear eee 435 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get pro
122. UR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act WARNING as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling CAUTION coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F TIREFIT TIRE RE
123. VEHICLE M Trip Odometer button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test the vehicle may fail the test This vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if this vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as par
124. Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to chang
125. YOUR VEHICLE 27 e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle e Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Ex
126. Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say EN Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the s
127. a Motor Home 336 Traction Control 0 perans rype eee 282 Trailer TOWINE cec RR IRE REESE haw 325 Cooling System Tips 05 336 EUtelies agare esencia URS ath ARE n AP s 328 Minimum Requirements sess 330 TIPS atas ek taces E RS e abe d des epe eda 335 Trailer and Tongue Weight 329 lona CT 333 Trailer Towing Guide 004 328 Trader Weighit sisa Sanc sedere EUER dea 328 Transfer Case Fluid 123 an mese de e ERR Es 410 Transmission i544 433 A Or REN 387 Automatic leen 256 260 265 387 Fld srei boa aa ed backs Coes e4 RR Ha Gard 410 Manual 3648 3a dia ah ea aia ge Y eoe ds 252 Range Indicator llle 260 Sul lS poesia crr ieri Eer Uu Edo M EU 256 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 134 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 004 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 4 ko am d kane 66 Tread Wear Indicators llle 302 Trip Odometer eee 158 163 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 2 62 40 405 Re 34 36 Trunk Release Emergency 00 36 Trunk Release Remote Control 34 Turn Signals s ases eee eee ees 124 160 UCI Connector 2 0 0 0 eee 217 uconnect Hands Free Phone 79 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 434 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 217 Universal
128. a eed eae da 46 Airbag Deployment 0040 51 53 Airbag Light sca cue dog rie Rx 52 55 69 160 Airbag Maintenance 0000s e ee 55 Airbag Side cone Sie ashy ae ale Yea le dua 47 52 Airbag Window Side Curtain 47 52 Alarm Light 422 6 Ree ee e eke ooh ES 166 Alarm Panie 423 do kem 2 Pde dea aed wees 24 Alarm Security Alarm llle 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio Ls 223 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 380 381 408 Disposal 2204 es cene ew crece aw 383 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 278281 Anti Lock Warning Light 168 280 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Cate ee quw s peer XH RA 389 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance Towing lt z camai aiue i a iona n ian i 93 Auto Down Power Windows 33 Auto Unlock Doors i222 Bede Rey dud 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror 75 en INDEX 439 Automatic Door Locks llus 30 31 Automatic Headlights llle 121 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 163 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives eve Rn 389 Automatic Transmission 260 265 387 388 Adding Fluid 0 0 cece eee 388 410 Autostick ira cid ee cds ox 269 Fluid and Filter Changes 388 Fluid Change 2e
129. abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays Integrated Power Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 CAUTION Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse e When installing the integrated power module Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 1 15 Amp Washer Motor erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Blue may allow water to get into the integrated power 2 25 Amp Powertrain Control module and possibly result in an electrical system Neutral Module PCM failure 3 25 Amp Ignition Run Start When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Neutral use only a fuse having the c
130. age the TPM sensor e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light 310 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 4 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended
131. al partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Hill Start Assist in this section Failure to depress the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving as this may result in transmission syn chronizer damage NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal I 2x Manual Shifter 051705511 Shifting Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal The six speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear This STARTING AND OPERATING 253 spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear CAUTION Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE Failure to do so may result in transmission damage You
132. als the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle Safety For the following example the combined weight of WARNING occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents WARNING Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affec
133. ana 127 Diagnostic System Onboard 365 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 Dipsticks Oil Engine cand ee acta kaa e ne ced e e 368 369 Power Steering vos sepe ek ewe eae af 275 Disabled Vehicle Towing lessen 359 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 383 Engine Oil osc erete teed eee REPOS 371 Dootr Locks tosis ase RSS Tika BLS 28 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 30 Door Opener Garage 0 0 eee eee 134 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 00050 271 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing hnc 272 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 76 Electrical Power Outlets 0004 143 Electronic Brake Control System 281 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 397 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 129 Electronic Stability Program ESP 285 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 159 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 169 Emergency Deck Lid Release 36 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 358 Hazard Warning Flasher 338 Jacking 2245s ne RE s Tanesi minnas 345 Jump Starting o css oe Pee sae ardue niii 355 Overheating iiie imd ge EVER 338 TOWING iue es RESSORT nee S 359 Emergency Trunk Release 0 0 36 Emission Control System Maintenance 366 412 Engines ciem oa as ee eU Sa devel 363 364
134. and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the
135. ank Capacity inasre a daro eR ed 408 Fuel System Caution 0 000000 00 322 Fueling i22seeck o e eee BRE E a 320 Fuses s cep ik athe Valse wale CRUCE SE 394 en INDEX 445 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 134 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 320 365 Gasoline Clean Air 2 2 0 cee eee 317 Gasoline Fuel lesen 316 Gasoline Reformulated iss 317 Gauges Coolant Temperature 005 159 Fuel 131250 34 aed eee Soe tae eed 158 Od met i ues ese y eek ER wee os 163 Speedometer iie 3d he 9 wes die RS 158 Tachometer spree cosa ene dne RUTRUM E Seat 158 Gear Ranges siis tue s ace tiedos ds 260 General Information 17 26 107 315 General Maintenance 000000 e eee 368 Glass Cleaning 1 ago has alae en hag 393 Gross Axle Weight Rating 324 326 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 324 326 GVWR 2 se Sintitaes gis obs doe ade oe ko Re 324 Hands Free Phone uconnect 79 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water iss e d ne piares 272 Hazard Warning Flasher 5 338 Head Restraints 0 0 eee eee eee 115 Headlights Reg ee gah ye rpm e EROR 403 Automatic i422 oia aei 121 Bulb Replacement sess creser areeni teaks 403 Cleaning te epe hese wae es 393 Delay 4 xe epo ente S eR Y se E gea 122 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 124 Lights On Reminder
136. ansmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces du
137. ar intervals such as every fuel stop Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 The engine oil filler cap also show
138. are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number th
139. ase review these recommendations for using Continued Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure
140. assure brake system performance all brake if the brake system warning light indicates system fail system components should be inspected periodically ure 7 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Continued boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid
141. at was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After e
142. ate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 0 Y 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your ey
143. ation usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various stat
144. ause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Start the engine Release the clutch pedal ON oO FF C N Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESP OFF switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 sec onds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting ESP Electronic Stability Program If Equipped This system enha
145. battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 NOTE Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP BAS light in the instrument cluster remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Jump Starting e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster discharged battery The resulting electrical spark battery Let the engine idle a few minutes Then start the could cause the battery to explode engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Continued 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued e During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump start FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear th
146. beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 00 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the in strument panel lights and if equipped the lighting in the door map pockets door handles and cupholders 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dome Light Posit
147. button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A
148. c Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play redde Seal een ER Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play sexa ERR mee tee es E AM FM CD DVD Radio RER REN If Equipped i2 dee xr Rees Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped lille Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode Bl Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 211 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 213 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 216 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 216 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI Tt Equipped sse xxn Seta Ree 217 Connecting The iPod 218 Using This Feature 218 Controlling The iPod Using Radio IBULLONS
149. can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position REVERSE Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE except when roc
150. ce MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothin
151. ch utilized frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the This requirement may limit the ability to always chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight asa slack for turning corners percentage of total trailer weight 332 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion for the proper tire replacement procedures Re placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake s
152. chanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND B
153. chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e
154. cle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 JUMP STARTING WARNING Continued WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ing Don t lean over battery when attaching ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Continued A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an outpu
155. cling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow a
156. column pull the control handle When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the outward To tilt the steering column move the steering accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or 40 km h shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Electronic Speed Control Lever 1 CANCEL 2 RESUME ACCEL 3 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL 81bc4c2c To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control system is on To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button again The system and the indicator light will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE
157. compat ible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit ters or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the trans mitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interfer ence with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron ics A blank transmitte
158. curate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position automatic transmission R Reverse or 1st gear manual transmission first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Manual Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle Parking Brake R
159. d Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To
160. d PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure Stop the vehicle Move the shift lever to the PARK position Turn OFF the engine Wait approximately 10 seconds oF og mc Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick 3 5L Engine Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold sl
161. d at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 The best time to check the engine oil level is about five The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range engines on these engines CAUTION CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine Change Engine Oil To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance regul
162. d cst ep EO OU 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 5L and 5 7L Engines with Automatic Transmission The 3 5L and 5 7L engines with automatic transmission are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available 5 7L Engine with Manual Transmission The 5 7L engine with manual transmis sion is designed to meet all emissio
163. d dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correc
164. d if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving mai
165. d then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se United States 0 0 0008 KR55S120123 Cariad
166. ded contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the WARNING condenser clean Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Brake System Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately In order to
167. ded that to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the for proper coolant selection High full clockwise position Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Operating Tips b is not recommended because it may cause window NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for d f fogging suggested control settings for various weather condi 58mg tions Vacation Storage Summer Operation Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles Le vacation for two weeks or more run the air must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculation without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demis
168. distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the EVIC if equipped Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Lo tirE Base Cluster When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles Change Oil Message Base Cluster Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrum
169. driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assistance under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manual for system function and operating information To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio uconnect phone if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears Turn by Turn
170. e D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a specific gear Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator NOTE In Autostick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right D or left D You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the left or right D D while in the D Drive position To disengage Autostick hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second The transmission will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged en STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rea
171. e cover to its original position With Keyless Go If Equipped To activate the override with a valid keyfob FOBIK inside of the vehicle and without the brake pedal pressed press the START STOP button once to go to the ACC position or twice to go to the ON position Then press the pink colored tab through the access port with a mm small flat bladed screwdriver or alike While pressing the override tab move the shift lever out of the PARK position When complete return the override cover to its original position Interlock Manual Override To activate the override first insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position Then press the pink colored tab through the access port with a small flat bladed screwdriver or alike While 260 STARTING AND OPERATING 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 5L Engine NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation Normal op eration will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears 051205512 ERE Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine
172. e 403 Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light Models With Halogen Headlights If Equipped Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight And Park Turn Light Models With High Intensity Discharge HID Headlights If Equipped Front Rear Side Marker Light Tail Turn Stop Light Center Tail Backup Light Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL License Light ll Fluids And Capacities Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts Engine Chassis MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 2 i Bic ccOe 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Coolant Pressure Cap 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 5 071406861 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYST
173. e RR Re d 276 Parking On Hill roce khe eb eme 276 Passing Light aids aere ag e RR ns 124 Personal Settings 2 2 oodd cepe hd hh Roe 178 Pels v o 66 Phone Cellulaf 44 32 Rep e c E 79 Phone Hands Free uconnect 05 79 Placard Tire and Loading Information 294 Power Brakes os 4 5 fist ARR Ca AH CAT en 278 Deck Lid Release llle 34 Distribution Center Fuses 397 Door LOCKS 2 219 eae 29 Mirrors sus cerata raai ok ea eee e m d 76 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 143 en INDEX 451 DCMS pince estan dte honte SUD cen p a og Seas 113 Steerig s c e eR E ERR PRSE 274 275 S tifOO oos das dee EAS e PS ed 140 Windows ree Lr eds BER RES RT RES 32 Power Steering Fluid 0 410 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 45 Preparation for Jacking 0 347 Pretensioners Seat Bells c enses athe Rae td RES 42 Programmable Electronic Features 178 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 4 20 Radial Ply Tit s sex dard ug ova ween See ale 300 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 382 Radio Operation 0 0 0 e eee 230 Radio Remote Controls 0005 228 Radio Satellite uconnect gps 4 222 Rear Cuphold r 44 iu a eer e Bie og e 146 Rear Seat Folding sess 117 Rear Window Defroster lle 149 Rear Wind
174. e area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control in Section 5 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
175. e battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opene
176. e enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked and 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Unlock Doors Automati cally on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the key in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you
177. e inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not
178. e loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs TRAILER TOWING Manual Transmission If Equipped Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trail
179. e mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand 8113841a Valet Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition
180. e on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John D
181. e seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children Rear Folding Seat should be seated and using the proper restraint When the seatback is folded to the upright position make system sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side o
182. e speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others HSA Hill Start Assist Manual Transmission Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could c
183. e the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR button to stop record ing You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup omes To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial e Voice Training 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experi
184. each the steering wheel or instrument panel This vehicle has supplemental side curtain air bags and they need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Side Door Pressure Sensors e Driver Airbag e Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win dows Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect rollover The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag as required for each type of impact e The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and they will not infl
185. earch for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours b
186. eat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 2 The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch belt is routed through the seat web guide When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a click is routed outside of the seat web guide the latch plate will contact the quarter trim panel Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 200000 209000029 shone Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision
187. ect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recogniti
188. ed button on the buckle comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position will withdraw any slack in the belt If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collisi
189. ed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 pu Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before 81334194 6 raising the vehicle Center Cap Removal WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange while the wheel is still on the ground Jack Engagement Locations 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire vs Lug Nut Removal Installation 1 Tighten 2 Loosen ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the
190. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or
191. eed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers
192. ehicle the NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN vehicle registration and the title en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ie Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 FOB With Integrated Key ll 13 Ignition Key Removal 13 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 aed Key serene Euer era PRO ERE 15 Replacement Keys craneo eiri ba eee 16 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information 17 Bi Vehicle Security Alarm 1 ee eee 18 Rearming Of The System ww aaaa 18 To Arm The System ee eee 18 To Disarm The System oe ee 18 Bi Illuminated Entry System 0 19 Mi Remote Keyless Entry 00005 20 To Unlock The Doors 00 21 To Lock The Doors 0000 23 Express Down Window Feature 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Open The Trunk 1 eee ee 24 Wi Trunk Lock And Release
193. ehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER REN and REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features
194. eing assessed against you 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions ired tly Until i i ith all si Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly ee pu vee pee aoe alan windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon haust gases from entering the vehicle monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a ADDING FUEL garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap engine running for an extended period If thevehicleis The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the stopped in an open area with the engine running for Jeft side of the vehicle Use a finger to pull open the door more than a short period adjust the ventilation system f the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement to force fresh outside air into the vehicle cap is for use with this vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Fuel Filler Cap Fuel Filler Cap If Equipped NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door 322 ST
195. eld Wiper Blades 376 Windshield Wipers 0 000000 00 00 126 Wiper Blade Replacement 376 Wiper Delay lt 0 sees eR EEEREGRHRAY 127 Wipers Intermittent 0 00000 127 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer
196. elease es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Automatic Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Parking Brake 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation o
197. elected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and
198. em VR Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if yo
199. emote Keyless Entry RKE allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a handheld radio transmitter The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs 81c6782c RKE Transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock both doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter Refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then pres
200. ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems N pe a Printed in U S A
201. encing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Easy Entry Seats Pulling upward on the lever located on the seatback allows the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide forward You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way This allows for easier access to the rear seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Easy Entry Seats Power Seats The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power seat switch can be moved forward and backward as well as up and down to control the position of the seat The power seatback switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback Push forward or rearward on the switch to change the position of the seatback Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Control 2
202. ent cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following pro cedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at t
203. ent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPARS Satin Select Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm
204. epair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOOO CO C O C mi mi Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt 3 5L 5 7L Engines Odom
205. er Trip Travel 000000 173 Connector UE e PP 217 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 217 Console sagesses doS TEES a a a s S E 147 Consoles FIGOP 4 Asse be xeu prede eemper 147 Console Overhead 0 00000000 eee 133 Contract Service 2 ee 431 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 382 Cooling System a esas cde wed eee eee RE 379 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 381 Coolant Capacity sesers naaier eee eee 408 Coolant Level 000 000 eee 379 383 Disposal of Used Coolant 383 Drain Flush and Refill 380 InSpeCHOD suse saree a rh eR aaa ee 383 Points to Remember liess 384 Pressure Cap ee 382 Radiator Cap ees REA onda 382 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 380 408 409 Corrosion Protection llle 389 Cruise Control Speed Control 129 Cruise Light pace ica eti 9 ERR TI 158 Cupholdets 2 gc cote wee EUER 146 394 Customer Assistance 0000 cece eee 429 Data Recorder Event 000000000 56 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 126 Daytime Running Lights 122 Dealer Service lees 368 Deck Lid Emergency Release 36 Deck Lid Power Release 000 34 Defroster Rear Window s 149 Defroster Windshield sss ss 70 233 10 442 INDEX M Delay Intermittent Wipers aoaaa ana
206. er in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping mo
207. erate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your
208. eration CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 81c2cd2b The Manual Temperature Control consists of a series of outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control Use this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as iden tified by the s
209. es Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated w
210. es Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant or 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the LEN airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that s
211. es Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than
212. es The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This espe cially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a mod
213. es for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the uconnect gps if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect lan guage selection Refer to Language Selection under aconnect phone in Section 3 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected both doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected both doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger door When All Doors 1st Press is selected both of 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK but
214. esponding number 1 6 where the 7 CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are
215. essure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors stopping ability may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam
216. etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge mn 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have copyright encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone op
217. eter Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 2 Inspect the rear axle fluid 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary d Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Ch
218. f Engine Fails To Start e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY WARNING Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into to change the ignition switch to the ON RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start a
219. f the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle en STARTING AND OPERATING 279 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e T
220. f the instrument panel 81e81ef1 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure the hood latch is fully latched before driving LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights ome will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO A position NOTE The engine must be running before the
221. f the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a
222. fforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe at tentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate es STARTING AND OPERATING 287 To turn the ESP ON again momentarily depress the ESP Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch and
223. files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency KHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160
224. fter you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press en STARTING AND OPERATING 251 CAUTION and hold the clutch pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and hold the ENGINE START STOP button for no more than 15 sec onds Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as
225. function Indicator sse 168 service Man als i E EE 433 Setting the Clock 000 183 194 198 207 Settings Personals ss bibo e Rr 178 Shift Indicator Light 000 255 SHINE e cei Pe PER eo E TE 256 Automatic Transmission 256 260 265 Shoulder Belts sese a 37 Side Anbag RR X RE ea Pes anne a 47 52 Side Curtain Window Airbag 47 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 236 Signals TUM ese m eee ncs 70 124 160 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 271 Snow Chains Tire Chains 304 Snow Tir s s2sgucedi4eede e edad hed d mua 306 Sound System Kicker 42 0065 4 xe cese Ed Rete e ER Re 227 Spare D 2 2 aere pe e dca EROR deg ih 300 345 Spark Plugs 454 5o eben eb RE E ES 409 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 0 02 409 Qil cuis yp on bg rpg S ende dos ed 409 Speed Control Cruise Control 129 Speedometer css race Ys DEO Ss Star hg lesum Ue E eae Gee dU Ee Automatic Transmission 454 INDEX ae Gold Weather cess esum Re xs 249 Emergency Jump Starting 355 Engine Fails to Start 040 249 Remote 4 5 034 4 265004 46 G8 4 96244 9 94 49 6 26 Starting and Operating 0 243 Starting Procedures sisses matasa siea e 243 Steering Column Controls 000000 cee 123 Column Lock 0 0 00 00 128 POWeP 4 3 oh PSRs ba daie eee A ae en 274 275
226. g Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more tha
227. g Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer should not be disconnected and should only be at the start of each warm season This service should replaced with a battery of the same type vented include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this CAUTION time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the
228. g its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high sp
229. g the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate JE Le MESEEK SEEK Ne c IN 042305233 RES RSC Radio 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search f
230. h the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will
231. h these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip
232. h to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular
233. hbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED 046405698 Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 any stereo audio source A new feature of the Kicker audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS 045105297 Remote Sound System Controls The remote
234. he BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With both doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However
235. he clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains so phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Continued 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Continued WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an Anti Lock Brake System ABS equipped vehicle must
236. he display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton withthe corr
237. he full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electr
238. he radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre pi Rate kbps cation quency KHz 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 ratl 92 312 98 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 4 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 ayers 56 48 WMA Specifica tion Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps WMA 44 1 and 48 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders
239. he transmis sion shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the override cover which is located to the right of the shift lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 pressing the override tab move the shift lever out of the PARK position When complete return the overrid
240. hicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 35L Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII Loose Fuel Filler Cap H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Program sa seem Ru AERE GRE B Replacement Parts ues RR REY YS a Dealer Service consue 3 ha EE ehh Mi Maintenance Procedures Lille Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System Cooling System 362 Brake System ee esate Pee HES imris 385 Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped 387 Manual Transmission If Equipped 387 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 387 Rear Axle oe eee e e s 389 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ee 389 MEUSE uiiloise 3ddceEx ED cesses 394 Integrated Power Module IPM 394 Rear Power Distribution Center 397 aM Vehicle Storage oussa Tekken er xh 401 E Replacement Light Bulbs 402 Mi Bulb Replacement ee
241. his light will turn on to indicate that the decklid may be ajar 28 Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster 041005513 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display e Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions uconnect phone If Equipped uconnect gps Screens If Equipped Audio Mode Display Surround Sound Modes If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button E Press and release the MENU button and the Functions Performance Pages uconnect gps If Equipped System Warnings System Sta Equipped FUNCTION SELECT Button a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con in this section SCROLL Button
242. ho have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TIY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service con tract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after the manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
243. ication of a problem with your clutch or transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 1 4 Skip Shift There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle This occurs when the engine coolant antifreeze is higher than 106 F 41 C vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph 30 km h but less than 21 mph 34 km h and the transmission is in first gear and the accelerator is at 1 4 throttle or less The 1 4 Skip Shift indicator message will be displayed during these times When the 1 4 Skip Shift indicator message is displayed the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth gear After you shift the transmission to fourth gear you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear Downshifting To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life down shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade WARNING Skipping more than one gear while downshifting could cause you to lose control of your vehicle You could have an accident CAUTION e If you skip more than one gear while downshift ing or downshift at too high an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph 24 km h as you could damage the engine and or clutch 256 STARTI
244. ice should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road
245. icle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Continued e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in and it will not shift during travel When trailering PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to e GCWR must not be exceeded control You could lose control of your vehicle and Total weight must be distributed between the tow have an accident vehicle and the trailer such that the following four f f ratings are not exceeded e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over mmm load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Loading loss of control poor performance or damage to Information placard brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen 2 GTW sion chassis structure or tires 3 GAWR e Safety chains must always be used between your l vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hit
246. icle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE e None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY The R
247. icle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture an
248. id range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Program Type 16 Digit mm Dis Program Type 16 Digit mm Dis No program type or un Nome Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adit Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft
249. ill remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with one window open then open the other window to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to mini mize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the s
250. ill turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 81eae896 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery
251. in to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the m
252. ing the vehicle s seat belts instead securing 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefu
253. intenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Cee Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 415 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine
254. ion Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS s lt The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 81t3862c Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermitten
255. ippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the D Drive position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the Overdrive mode the transmission will oper ate automatically shifting between the five available gears When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the D Drive position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Autostick 5 7L Engine Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in th
256. is not being received 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M 81979401 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds an
257. it Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 FL v WARNING j e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be Door Lock Plunger seriou
258. ith the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone a
259. ity Persnlty Public Public 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Program Type 16 Digit T Dis Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in t
260. ized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary d Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Ll Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t Inspect the rear axle fluid Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes O O O C oo Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S
261. ized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING and reverse feature as required by federal safety CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes standards This includes most garage door opener sage states CHANNELS CLEARED models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position cause serious injury or death 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point th
262. k Location Spare Tire Stowage H If Your Engine Overheats Preparations For Jacking Jacking And Changing a Tire Compact Spare Tire Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation lf Equipped 2i 2er9 e Re mE RR B jump Starting lll Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Towing A Disabled Vehicle O Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground e sese Y Rueda ee teed ede 359 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 000 360 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YO
263. king the vehicle 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range CAUTION shifts and the best fuel economy Select the 3 range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis sion damage NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in cold temperatures shifts into WARNING Overdrive may be delayed Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident D Overdrive This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts and down of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera ture Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets too hot the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down After cooldown Overdrive will resume normal operation en STARTING AND OPERA
264. l After the hot air is pushed 4 from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7J and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near Z2 COOL OR COLD If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and f then turn the air NIE CONDITIONS conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn bg 646 the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between oT S3 Jand S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 4 If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and In very cold weather dll if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045605322 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B Starting Procedures Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Keyless Go Normal Starting Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or E297 C cs adu es dus der od sns dn SS Ried If Engine Fails To Start After Starting ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped ll Manual Transmission If Equipped Six Speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmissio
265. lant testing or for prolonged periods during very rough or steam from your radiator If you see or hear idling or malfunctioning operating conditions steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contai
266. lay Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player me
267. ld Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 CAUTION ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 mi 800 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7 Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil durin
268. le should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Senger safe to Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous S
269. link 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or
270. ll remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could v
271. lly when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages E behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then
272. ls can be peeled off The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi after soaking with warm water mately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra operation press the switch again To prevent excessive sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 155 Wi Instrument Cluster Base 156 Wi Instrument Cluster Premium 157 B Instrument Cluster Description 158 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 169 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays uu iex and tre Rd e HRS graded 171 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Trip Functions Keyless Go Display If Equipped Compass Display Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped 224 emot hg RR RE System Warnings Customer Information Features 2 4 c 9 e ee ean A aia Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 43 eie he xa he e Re Re 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Dis
273. lt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the
274. malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ESP BAS NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Mal function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 289 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only
275. mall children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 k
276. ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be 1 Worn Tire replaced 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designa
277. mpt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized deal ers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers w
278. multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 818c9c32 Multifunction Lever 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can also signal a lane change by moving the multifunction lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent Releasing the multi function lever at the detent will provide three flashes If either indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved see your autho rized dealer for service NOTE A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a con tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
279. n If Equipped General Information Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 5L Engine 240 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine i 9 n ee Ee 265 la AutoStick If Equipped 269 AutoStick 3 5L Engine 269 AutoStick 5 7L Engine 270 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 271 Acceleration cise ede fee cer Sua talons 271 Wrachon PE 271 E Driving Through Water oe 272 Flowing Rising Water 272 M Power Steering Loss ee x xe 274 Power Steering Fluid Check 275 a Parking Brake cius rr m tiita 276 Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped ll Brake System Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped lll Electronic Brake Control System ABS Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped TCS Traction Control System If Equipped BAS Brake Assist System If Equipped HSA Hill Start Assist Manual Transmission Only ESP Electronic Stability Program If Equipped ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 S
280. n as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter 0105203 1S in the passenger compartment Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the ignition key 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for regular ignition key use 2 Insert the metal part of the valet key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal es STARTING AND OPERATING 247 To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again Using the ENGINE START ST
281. n 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONE ETC Recreational towing of this vehicle is not recommended NOTE Ifthe vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flasher lI TIREFIT Tire Repair If Equipped H Jacking And Tire Changing Jac
282. n 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Continued
283. n on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Express Down Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely To Open The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times within five seconds to open the trunk Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights w
284. n the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 6 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 8 Do not lean against the door as the airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 9 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Airbag Warning Light Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back e Front Passenger Airbag comfortably extending your arms to r
285. nces directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than rm e The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also appropriate for the steering wheel position instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction a
286. nd during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure ac
287. nect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 t Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wis
288. ned high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law 436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 438 INDEX ae About Your Brakes esses paset 0 0 0 00005 276 278 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 278 281 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 381 Adding Fuel 2 222189 er meg 320 Adding Washer Fluid lessen 376 Additives Fuel Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 372 Air Conditioner Maintenance 374 Air Conditioning as eer Reds 230 Air Conditioning Controls 230 Air Conditioning Filter losses 236 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 237 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 374 375 Air Conditioning System 230 374 Air Pressure Tires 1 0 200000 cee 298 Airbag fis cee ee biad ce wed eneng
289. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake System ABS Light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes the ABS Anti Lock Brake System the TCS Traction Control System the BAS Brake Assis
290. non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the v
291. ns regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD es STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV
292. ns a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Ple
293. ntaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
294. nufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be
295. ode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the wrap around mode So if the track is at the same PRESET button again to go back to Play bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards mode counter clockwise to get to the track faster LIST button The LIST button will display the top e n List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod
296. oe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be delete
297. of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension
298. oid the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 81351e5e Power Sunroof Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Opening Sunroof Partially WARNING deat oe Pe Press and hold the switch in the rearward position e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold tended children can become entrapped by the the switch in the rearward position the sunroof will open power sunroof while operating the power sunroof fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once switch Such entrapment may result in serious the sunroof stops moving injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or Closing Sunroof Partially any object to project through the sunroof opening Press and hold the switch in the f
299. on These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snug and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Refer to information on Air bags in this section Like the front airbags the preten sioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec onds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming T
300. on Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 28 10 Amp Ignition Run 35 5 Amp Antenna Module if Red Orange equipped Power Mir 29 5Amp Cluster Electronic Sta rors Orange bility Program ESP 36 25 Amp Hands Free Phone if Powertrain Control Clear equipped Radio Module PCM STOP 37 15 Amp Transmission LIGHT Switch Blue 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Vehicle In Red Mirrors Steering Con Red formation Module if trol Module SCM equipped 31 39 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if 32 Red equipped 33 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview 24 m E Orange Mirror Heated Seats if equipped Switch Bank ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 window switch and the passenger power window Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity Fuse 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of 41 10 Amp AC Heater Control these systems see your authorized dealer for service Red Headlights Tire Pres sure Monitoring if VEHICLE STORAGE equipped If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 42 30Amp Pronk Blower Motor 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your Pink battery 43 E rr Rear Window Defroster e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery in 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of Blue Sunroof if equi
301. on System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed
302. on a jack If JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap 812c5587 Spare Tire Fastener 4 Remove the spare tire 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack 81344fb9 Opening The Access Panel 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 81b31802 Jack Fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level
303. on as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position REVERSE Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com pletely stopped ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NEUTRAL In NEUTRAL no power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed Do not engage NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The engine may be started in this range Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic
304. onic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi ce mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed i Each tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tir
305. ons 325 Fuel System Cautions 319 Trailer Hitch Classification 328 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 320 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer M Adding Fuel 00 ccc cece cece eee 320 WSN RAMEE astantes Ez Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap sssese 320 Trailer And Tongue Weight 329 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 323 TOWNE ARE cficadigtatedfiaseus 390 a Vehicle Loading deereiaaer eR bh 323 TOWING TDS ae 2 RANE aq dun don Vehicle Certification Label p N PCM AM RM UEM MN M Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 324 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 WARNING Continued e Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the ex haust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the
306. oolant is warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is considered a normal condition Pulling the shift lever into the 3 position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into second gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK e Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine
307. or the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will beg
308. orrect amperage rating 4 25 Amp EGR Solenoid The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Neutral Alternator may result in a dangerous electrical system over 5 m load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 6 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Neutral corrected 7 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 8 25 Amp Starter 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan Neutral Red 9 16 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper 17 Pink 18 11 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 19 Pink ABS Valves 20 m 12 40Amp Radiator Fan Lo High 21 E Green 2 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Red ABS Pump Motor 14 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 81100354 Rear Power Distribution Center LEN 81100358 Access Panel 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse e When installing the power distribution center Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Yellow ma
309. orward position Injury may result Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the switch in the forward position the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof
310. os 222 Schedule Maintenance sess 412 Seat Belt Maintenance 00 394 Seat Belt Reminder sese 43 Seat Belts 22 eee 36 37 69 And Pregnant Women 0000065 45 Child Restraint lille 58 59 60 64 Extend f sger reine we ale doe a ae ce RC ER 45 Front Seat lt 5 432 deem dies ade Hed 37 38 Inspection uci x s 3er Be oe delle dr E rg ee 69 Operating Instructions llle 38 Pretensioners cc ee 42 Rear Seat dpa Rr pue enu PRESE 37 Reminder serront ratkeaa ne eh BRS n 162 Untwisting Procedure 00050 42 Seats errau ro REX be EO SEG Bea eo i 112 Adjustment 24414 s vee ee satis ta eee ees 112 Head Restraints 0 0 00 eee eee 115 Heated as cena doh ew ee Gah eee aes 116 Height Adjustment 05 113 Lumbar Support 000000 115 POWEL L22 adue aS oe CE R3 BS 113 en INDEX 453 Rear Folding steve ce x oy ne Ei oe 4 117 Seatback Release 0 0000 117 THUONG fen bs obo on se tinn EnEn des mack 113 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 380 409 Selection of Oll 2 e e 370 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 16 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance leen 429 Service Contract sex gees RR ns 431 Service Engine Soon Light Mal
311. ot be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 5L Automatic 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 5 7L Automatic 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
312. otating the temperature control knob full counterclockwise e Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Remote Start If Equipped During remote start operation the climate control soft ware may override the climate control settings depend ing on the outside ambient temperature The table below explains the different scenarios that could occur during remote start operation Once the driver enters the vehicle the control will return to the customer selected settings This feature was de signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme conditions To enable the feature customers must park their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the four blower speeds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 If Outside Ambient Mode Overrides To Temperature Overrides To Rear Window Defroster Temperature Is Active Less than 40 F Mix Full Heat Yes Between 40 F and 80 F _ No Override No Override No More than 80 F Bi Level Full Cool No NOTE to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect e The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene the blower control set to the O or OFF position glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer e For maximum performance it is recommen
313. ow Features 000 0000s 149 Recorder Event Data 00000008 56 Recreational Towing 00000 e 336 Reformulated Gasoline lulu 317 Refrigerant sechs Gare i Res Re Re Sd 375 Release Hood 1 0 ce es 119 Reminder Lights On 00050 123 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000000 0008 43 Remote Control Starting System saecu ek eee Se E is 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 228 Remote Starting System llle 26 Remote Trunk Release 00000005 34 Replacement Bulbs 0000006 402 Replacement Keys llle 16 Replacement Parts 452 INDEX M Replacement Tires eese 303 Reporting Safety Defects liiis 432 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 163 Restraint Head lees 115 Restraints Child tanins anusa 58 Restraints Occ pant usen cae ead dew a 36 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 358 Rotation Tires epid eed en ie hgp 306 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 69 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 70 Safety Defects Reporting 0 432 Safety Exhaust Gas 00000000 68 Safety Information Tire 040 289 Dalety VIPS sis rw ictus AS ih yang Sone paved Sp ach 68 Satellite Radio Antenna 223 Satellite Radio uconnect studi
314. ower outlet can cause damage e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console 81607230 Front Cupholders Illuminated Front Cupholders If Equipped The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs They are turned on with the headlights or parking lights Refer to Interior Lights under Lights in Section 3 Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants el bows es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
315. passenger Side curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The supplemental side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions How ever even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 2 Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 3 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride i
316. pect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires I Inspect the rear axle fluid 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCOC O C O L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing
317. phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Depending on
318. pped service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the onus Ti Emain i ina d air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes m Cavities 11 12 an contain self resetting fuses in the fresh air and high blower setting This will d Vc bs Mr dd e ani by an Pid ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the TAEC AER Er AAE C USE ana TUS SPIE Seah SW NES ale possibility of compressor damage when the system is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The started again passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lights WsW Rear Compartment Trunk Light 562 Overhead Console Reading Lights 578 Visor Vanity Lights 00 A6220 Glove Box Light 194 Door Courtesy 4 pine rete deni hb ede pps 562 Shift Indicator Light 1 scere JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder Lighting LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight High Intensity Discharge HID lille DIS Ser
319. pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go
320. provide the same heat level for both cushion and seatback The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicators in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Heated Seat Switch Press the switch once to select High level heat ay ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off Two indica tors will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on th
321. r wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc e Transmission shifting will be more sharper when Autostick is engaged Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water
322. r is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys you can program new transmitters to the system by performing the following steps 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new integrated key is programmed The RKE trans mitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grated key contact your authorized dealer for details
323. r motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cy
324. r you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and is inter ested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual WATER INFUEL REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR BULB WIPER FAILURE s x a ML REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH FUEL FILL SE REAR WINDOW a DONE LIGHT Ld wa p ve WINDSHIELD ENGINE OL REAR WINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED QD W F BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION GLOW PLUG FOWEM WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUD ANO WASHER SRS b RIRHRG E LFU MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP zD e H ZO e 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE Qt Aa PASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF ga ge MASANE TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT ow KEY
325. ra ir tulad ad 372 Air Conditioning llle 236 Engine Oll isse skr pe E REY es 371 409 Engine Oil Disposal 44 INDEX a Flashers Hazard Warning so sredsesery torati gitu 338 TumiSignal ccs RC RDAR EA 70 124 160 Elash To P 3S 2 123944 neraman E Pu 124 Flat Tire Changing x ceste ctos RORIS orm 345 Flooded Engine Starting 249 Eh d Brake 52i jx Gwen 410 Fluid Capacities ss scies ee e E Re E es 408 Fluid Leaks llle 70 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 387 Brake xg edd Robe EURO Peu d Res 385 Cooling System 1 6 eee eee 379 Engine Qil iis oe gee eee Ss a Rs 368 369 Power Steering 6 6 2 i mi ena ios 275 Fluids 2222 bps a heure Kho oak hae wee 409 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 409 Fog Lights 42cm eR we ee 123 162 Folding Rear Seat opady series a pia 117 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 358 Fuels ae oo baled eee de de ORG ERA PR S 316 Adding ive e seed eau ee nae chess 320 Addit ves 6440634444444 6 Ged OER ORES 319 Cleati At cep UR ah ee RUE 317 Ethanol 22 22 Rm RR 317 Filler Cap Gas Cap ipat tgi aik a 320 Gasoline 2 22 m ents 316 Gauge sscdoedus ke mes ee ow ee ee ae 158 Materials Added illl 319 Methanol 2 stag ds dade ear E Rd 317 Octane Rating 5s p04 4 dee iners 316 409 Requirements 0 0 0c cece eee eee 316 Specifications s Cia ks sexa ae koe X epe 409 T
326. re Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tigh
327. re overloading and failure manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on You could lose control and have an accident P215 65 R17 P225 60 R18 and P235 55 R18 size tires CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 The 245 45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire chains CAUTION Continued e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Continued bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain ma
328. rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Tether Strap Mounting 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the chi
329. ring other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION e If your
330. rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this Section for further information D SS 0 e s Vanity Mirrors An vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use Power Mirror Control the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off Closing the mirror cover turns off the light position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward 81130084 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod and Extender Features of Sun Visor Es To use the slide on rod feature of the sun visor rotate the Slide On Rod Extender sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To
331. rs will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO A position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Tilt Steering Column ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To unlock the steering
332. rt Manual Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid Rear Axle 3 5L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 API GL 5 Rear Axle 5 7L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 412 Required Maintenance Intervals E Maintenance Schedule sss 412 COMmreoemMm zon mMoZzr2zma2Zz rz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control System These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and serv
333. rvals Automatic Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have CAUTION Continued your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does CAUTION not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Continued damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum tr
334. rvice is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touc
335. rysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 11 Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped filter i Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Rotate tires 1 Inspect the CV joints I Replace the engine air cleaner filter 14 Inspect exhaust system 1 Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine 1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Q1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary equipped with four wheel disc brakes 1 Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions
336. s and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
337. s if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit
338. s of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only 1 With the vehicle stopped place the shift lever in NEUTRAL then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 Place the shift lever in 1st gear or Reverse and then apply the parking brake NOTE e If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position Keyless Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal Clutch Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC ON RUN and en STARTING AND OPERATING 249 START To change the ignition switch positions without Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of steps an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended I
339. s the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient servi
340. set push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climb ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and an optional power sunroof switch 8125e
341. set all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Keyless Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position 041005979 Keyless Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position If desired the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Compass Display COMPASS Button The compass readings indicate the direction C the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree t
342. should always use first gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Recommended Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in recom mended shift speed chart MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS Axle Ra 1 4 4 5 5 6 tio mph 20 25 42 3 73 km h 32 40 67 391 mph 20 37 48 km h 32 59 77 Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions relatively steady speeds may result in increased fuel economy Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE When at a complete stop you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition key ON and increased shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition key OFF This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain you may hear your transmission This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged clutch pedal released but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM Also this may be more noticeable when the transmis sion is warm This is a normal condition and is not an ind
343. sith twa dee e n 8 388 Fluid Level Ch eck se usi eds 387 Fluid Type 2 vss 8 4 6 eek RR e ss 410 Gear Ranges ied eder ewkbpUter4mT E E 260 Overdrive arse egies rue REESE E 262 Shuf ng ass aude Re E ERES 260 265 Sp cial Additives soe s 389 Torque Converter 0 0 00 0000 ee 263 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 264 268 Autostick 34 4095 opira Bogs chee ed ERE 269 Axle PUIG oeur gia cie RR e aie CR 410 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 410 Battery 222925403 ae aa Fre uus ied does 372 Emergency Starting 0 0 eae 355 Jump Starting seem dy e eee ES ae Es 355 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Lochos e eg 24244 Re 454 400 356 372 Belts Seat 1 ee eee 37 69 Body Mechanism Lubrication 375 B Pillar Location senex Rr haa ao 294 Brake Assist System 282 Brake Control System Electronic 281 Brake Fluid ioci tme ERR 410 Brake Parking llle 276 Brake System 4 br RR RR REA 278 385 Anti Lock ABS 32 e eese 278 281 Fluid Check 4 25 2 eA ae es 385 410 Master Cylinder iles 385 TEM 440 INDEX aa Parkitig istum tule eR ERE a 276 Warning Light llle 164 278 Brakes 0h ues eo 4 med ONE ES dp E 278 385 Brake Transmission Interlock 258 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 67 Brightness Interior Lights 125 Bulb Replacement oi cser radii aneka 402 403 Bulbs Light s
344. sly or fatally injured Don t leave the key in If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the ignition A child could operate power win the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not dows other controls or move the vehicle inside the vehicle before closing the door Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ves Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and either door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the key is in the ignition and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed 1 2 3 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature can b
345. surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas 2 Set the parking brake and place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 3 Turn OFF the ignition 4 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 5 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking and Changing a Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Continued WARNING Continued Never start or run the engine with the vehicle ona jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is ona jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stow
346. t System and the ESP Electronic Stability Program These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill Start Assist HSA is standard on manual transmission models ABS Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking For more information about ABS refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System If Equipped This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accelera
347. t Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipe
348. t of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If the OBD II system is not ready you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether the vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPA
349. t that exceeds 12 Volts The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EM NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
350. t tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style en STARTING AND OPERATING 301 vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only Wit
351. ted by improper tire pressure Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Continued Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 297 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the veh
352. ten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud 3 Wheel Lug Nut 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehi
353. ter Description 158 Loading Vehicle 4 iia dat ree ts 323 325 Capacities sos s coce pessa 8340 44 dd sda 325 jhn e CMT 294 BOOKS 2 95 vet cuu dpud apod te s Adam da 28 Auto Unlock rss aieeaa aa a oea R E ee 31 Automatic Door lt ssstesiai ristita aris 30 DOOL caso Sie eee ea eee a SA DER ee E 28 Power DOOR oii eee eR da ia ee Rae ew es 29 Low Tire Pressure System 004 307 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Lors ee en ERES fag Pangea 61 63 Lubrication Body llle 375 Lumbar Support eee ee eee 115 Maintenance Free Battery 4 372 Maintenance General llle 368 Maintenance Procedures 0 00055 368 Maintenance Schedule 412 Maintenance Sunroof 0 0008 eee 143 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 168 366 Manual Service 0 0 0 ce ee eee 433 Manual Transmission 252 387 389 Fluid Level Check 0 0008 387 389 Map Reading Lights 124 133 Master Cylinder Brakes 385 Methanol 0 204400 72 net anea xe RP 317 Mini Trip Computer 00000 173 MItEOES cance ase Bis eae a ea WIEN RAUM RU Ta EAE 75 Automatic Dimming lees 75 Electric Powered 0 00 eee eens 76 Electric Remote 000 eee eee 76 Exterior Folding 0 0 0 0 02 ee eee 76 Heated i csi acy de Seas R3 Fass UE RUE 77 Vanity
354. ters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle Set the Fan control to the high position AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS full clockwise Press the 4 button Set the Mode control at or between VERY HOT 3 and Set the temperature control to full coo
355. that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Manual Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or damage to the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Change Transmission Fluid If contaminated with water change the fluid immedi ately See your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance inte
356. the blower fan switched off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect
357. the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off off mode is overcome turn the ESP ON again by momen g tarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is ESP combined with BAS indicator If the power BAS supply is interrupted battery disconnected or 5 discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a
358. the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with
359. the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a messag
360. the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and the supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehic
361. then you can follow e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this e Preset 3 Albums system Beare Senes MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is e Preset 5 Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to following this warning could result in an accident uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius se
362. tic Dimming Inside Mirror WISOR a use ost teres repente e SAPE RS RR 78 lf Equipped x3 ek kc ES 75 WMiuconnect phone If Equipped 79 Outside Mirrors seses 224 estes ae 76 Operation cgs ebere es hh ts edes 81 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 76 Phone Call Features 2 2 ee 89 Power Mirrors xxx mnm dee nesat 76 uconnect phone Features 91 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 77 Advanced Phone Connectivity 96 Vanity Mirrors dented teabega rn prane ik 77 Things You Should Know About Your Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 77 aM DCH a bares tena 28 General Information 107 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Wi Voice Recognition System VR E To Open And Close The Hood 119 Na IMMER Ree MH EEEE 120 Rene Seen er M we d Headlight Switch seses sehr d 120 Commands iesonexwagkac e STEREO 109 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 121 Voice Training 6 llle 112 Headlights On With Wipers Available With MSeats 2 RR RR 112 Auto Headlights Only 121 Easy Entry Seats 1 2 0 eee eee 112 Headlight Time Delay 122 Power Seats xa eashpesu keen ai eee oe 113 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 122 Manual Front Seatback Recline 114 Lights
363. tion and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information BAS Brake Assist System If Equipped This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you en STARTING AND OPERATING 283 must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessiv
364. tion of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet capacity other than what was originally equipped SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain index could result in ti
365. tion pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equ
366. tion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may n
367. ton To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlamps On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO A position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the
368. trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 9 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting turns on while driving or stays on have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible
369. u are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long
370. uid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds a
371. urns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds
372. use the extender feature of the sun ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE e The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect featur
373. utton Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of
374. vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon metal and painted surfaces sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed oe hose off the undercarriage at least once e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equival
375. vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada
376. very uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has net
377. viced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlight 9005 Front Park Tum Light 0 3157A Front Fog Light 000 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker 00 0005 168 UBL 1 ae i rn er eee 3057K Tail Stop Turn Light 0 3057K Rear Side Marker 200000022 aes 168 Backtp Light 2 2 4 v tytn hehe p be 921 Center High Mount Stop Light CHMSL 4 iue md ERRARE LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Licenses su ka ses d e ba Cd ges rese oda 168 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Park Turn Light Models with Halogen Headlights If Equipped See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight and Park Turn Light Models with High Intensity Discharge HID Headlights If Equipped HID Headlights The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the HEADLIGHT switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlights when the HEADLIGHT switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly See your au thorized dealer for
378. want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control both of the door windows Power Window Switches There is a single window control on the passenger s door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger s door The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE AUTO Down Feature e The door window will lower slightly if it is closed The driver s door power window switch and passenger completely when opening the door The window will door power window switch have an AUTO down fea return to its fully closed position after closing the door ture Press the window switch to the second detent This action allows the door to open without resistance release and the window will go down automatically and prevents window and seal damage To open the window part way press the window switch e You can remotely lower both the driver side and to the first detent and release it when you want the passenger side windows at the same time Refer to window to stop Remote Keyless Entry Express Down Window Fea iare im ihis sechor To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly WARNING The power window switches w
379. will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Multifunction Lever The
380. will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
381. witch will operate Trunk Release Button The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 With the ignition switch in the ON position the Trunk TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display WARNING ill reappear o the trunk is closed on eer ree Do not allow children to have access to the trunk With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key either by climbing into the trunk from outside or removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym through the inside of the vehicle Always close the bol will display until the trunk is closed trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Trunk Emergency Release B1f31bcb Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are
382. work coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the ucon
383. y allow water to get into the power distribution 2 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod center and possibly result in an electrical system Green ule IPM failure 3 When replacing a blown fuse it is important to 4 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Green ule IPM The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated B 30Amp Heated Seats if may result in a dangerous electrical system over Pink equipped load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 6 m 20 Amp Fuel Pump indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Yellow corrected 7 15 Amp Sub Amp if equipped Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec 17 20 Amp Cluster Blue tor DLC Wireless Con Yellow trol Module WCM 18 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet Wireless Ignition Node Yellow oa 19 10 Amp Stop Lights 9 z 20Amp Power Outlet Red Yellow 20 A 10 21 11 22 12 23 E 13 24 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control 25 Red Cluster Security Mod ule if equipped 26 a 15 m 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con Red troller ORC 16 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Descripti
384. y in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM ETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
385. ymbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel and the center console These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the instrument panel center console and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost w Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost and Floor or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not
386. ynchronizing ESP ww ee 287 Lie Of Tire celere ols oe oe ee ed 303 ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And Replacement Tires 303 ESI aE CIIM eite sesta ed ae B Tire Chains 0 eee 304 Wi Tire Safety Information 05 289 E Snow Tires suu 306 a MALE am H Tire Rotation Recommendations Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 294 Bi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Wi Tires General Information 296 BROWER sox desenereedagdesedees Tite Pressut ik aere Re eee RR 296 Premium System f Equipped Tire Inflation Pressures nananana 298 vr REM Kadal ED ee 200 Bl Fuel Requirements 00 316 Compachpae Duo TE EJUppEN siccae 300 3 5L And 5 7L Engines With Automatic Tite Spinning 5 52 94 0s Gee da Res 301 Transmission 2 0 6 0 000 e aes 316 Tread Wear Indicators 302 5 7L Engine With Manual Transmission 316 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Reformulated Gasoline 317 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 324 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 317 Overloading sese eem 324 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 317 Loading secie ipese o9 ines pist 325 MMT In Gasoline 0006 318 W Trailer Towing sees 325 Materials Added To Fuel 319 Common Towing Definiti
387. your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustai
388. ystem an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 CAUTION ssid Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring CAU SALE Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for loaded it should have its own brakes and they motoring safety should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles WARNING wiring harness m Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations

Dodge 2009 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents